Canon | PowerShot SX710 HS | User guide | Canon PowerShot SX710 HS User guide

Canon PowerShot SX710 HS User guide
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۳‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪© CANON INC. 2015‬‬
‫‪CEL-SV6ZA2N0‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪* *SDHC‬‬
‫‪۲ ۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪* *SDXC‬‬
‫‪۲ ۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺟﺩ ﺃ ًّﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫* ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ )= ‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪.UHS-I‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ .Canon Inc‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺅﺳﺳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻋﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﻭﺍ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺗﻧﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪٪۹۹٫۹۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺿﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء“ )= ‪.(٤‬‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ )‪ (۱۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ )‪ (۸‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ )‪ (۱۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪ (۱٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫] [ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ )‪ (۷‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫● =‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ(‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻣﻼءﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑـ ”ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﺍﻥ ” ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ“ ﻭ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ—ﺳﻭﺍء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫) ˻˺() ˺˺( ) ˹˺( )̂(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫) ́( ) ̀() ˿( ) ˾(‬
‫) ˽(‬
‫) ˽( )˼(‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫) ˻(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫) ˾(‬
‫) ˼(‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫) ˺˺(‬
‫) ˻˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫) ˿˺( ) ˾˺( ) ˽˺(‬
‫) ̀˺(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫) ˼˺(‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫)‪(۱۰‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] )ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ([‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫)ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ([ ‪] /‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪]:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪) ]:‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ([ ‪] /‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ([‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ([‬
‫* ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪.(۱۰۷ =) NFC‬‬
‫) ˿(‬
‫) ̀(‬
‫) ́(‬
‫) ˼˺(‬
‫) ˽˺(‬
‫) ˾˺(‬
‫) ˿˺(‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫) ˻( ) ˺(‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫) ̂(‬
‫) ˹˺(‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪) AV OUT‬ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ( ‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ DIGITAL‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ([ ‪/‬‬
‫]‬
‫)‪ / [(Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ HDMITM‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] )ﻓﻼﺵ([ ‪ /‬ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] )‪/ [(Macro‬‬
‫]‬
‫)ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ([ ‪ /‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪*(N‬‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ -‬ﺑﺣﺙ([‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﻳﻛﻝ(‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ([‬
‫)ﻋﺭﺽ([‬
‫)ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ([‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪) FUNC.‬ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ( ‪SET /‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] )ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ([ ‪/‬‬
‫]‬
‫)‪ / [(Story Highlights‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫● ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۲٤ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪۲٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪۲٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۲٥ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۲٥ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪۲ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪۲٥ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ‪۲ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ‪۳ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ‪۳ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ‪۱۱ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪۱۳ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲٦ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲٦ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۷ .....................................................................FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۲۸ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۲۹ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪۳۰ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪۳۰ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱٦ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‪۳۱ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ‪۱٦ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۳۱ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ‪۱٦ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱٦ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۷ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۷ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۸ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱۹ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱۹ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۲۰ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ‪۲۱ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪۲۱ ....................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۲ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۲۳ .................................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪۳۱ ....................................................................(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‪۳۳ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۳٤ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۳٤ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪۳٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۳٤ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪۳٥ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۳٦ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪۳٦ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۳۷ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪۳۷ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ( ‪۳۷ ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﺑﺣﺙ( ‪۳۸ ........‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪۳۹ .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ‪٤۰ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ(‪٤۰ ................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪٤۱ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۱ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤۲ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪٤۲ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪٤۳ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪٤۳ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪٤۳ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪٤٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪٤٥ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪٤٦ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ‪٤٦ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ‪٤۷ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٤۸ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪٤۸ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪٤۸ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫)ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪٤۸ ..............................................................(۳:٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ ‪٤۹ .................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪٤۹ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‪٥۰ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‪٥۰ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪٥۰ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ‪٥۱ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪٥۱ ......................................................................... IS‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪٥۱ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪٥۲ ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٥۲ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪٥۲ .................................................................AF-‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪٥۳ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٥۳ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٥۳ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٥٤ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ‪٥٥ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ( ‪٥٥ .................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ )ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( ‪٥٦ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪٥٦ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ )ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ( ‪٥۷ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪٥۷ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‪٥۹ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ( ‪٥۹ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ( ‪٦۰ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪٦۰ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ( ‪٦۱ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺱ‪٦۱ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪٦۲ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪٦۲ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٦۲ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ )ﺗﺑﺳﻡ(‪٦۲ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ( ‪٦۳ ..................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‪٦۳ .........................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ‪٦٤ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ‪٦٤ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ‪٦٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪٦٥ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٦٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ‪٦٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪٦٦ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪٦٦ ......................................................................... iFrame‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪٦۷ .................................................................................P‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۸ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷۹ .................................................................... FE‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٦۸ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۷۹ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪٦۷ ..................................................... ([P‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪٦۸ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦۸ .............................................. (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪٦۸ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪٦۹ ..............................................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪٦۹ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۷۰ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪۷۰ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪۷۰ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ( ‪۷۰ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ‪۷۱ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪۷۲ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )‪۷۲ .............................................................. (Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪۷۲ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪۷۳ .............................. (MF‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪۷۳ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪۷۳ ........................................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‪۷٤ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪۷٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪۷٤ ..................................... (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪۷٥ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪۷٦ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷٦ .................................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪۷۷ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۷ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۷۷ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۷۷ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۷۷ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﻲء ‪۷۸ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪۷۸ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۷۹ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪۷۹ ......................................................................... IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪۸۰ .............................................................. M‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸۰ ........................................................ ([Tv‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸۱ ..................................................... ([Av‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸۱ ............................... ([M‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۸۲ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۸۳ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۸۳ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۸٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ( ‪۸٥ .............................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ‪۸٥ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۸٥ ................................................................... GPS‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪۸٥ .....‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۸٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪۸٦ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۸٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪۸٦ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ‪۸۷ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪۸۷ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪۸۸ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ‪۸۸ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ‪۸۹ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۸۹ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۸۹ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۰ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۰ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪۹۱ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹۱ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۱۰٦ ............................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۹۱ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‪۹۲ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۹۲ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۹۳ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۹۳ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ‪۱۰٦ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹۳ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۹٤ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪۹٤ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ‪۹٤ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۹٤ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۹٥ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹٥ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۹٥ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۹٦ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ‪۹٦ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۹۷ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪۹۷ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹۷ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ‪۹۸ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ( ‪۹۹ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ( ‪۹۹ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۱۰۰ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱۰۱ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪۱۰۲ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱۰۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۰۷ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪۱۰۷ .................................... NFC‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۰۷ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۱۰۹ .......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪۱۰۹ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۱۰ .................................................. Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۱۲ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪۱۱۲ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱۱۳ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱۱۳ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱۱۳ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱۱۳ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‪۱۱٤ .............‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪۱۱٤ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۱۱٤ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪۱۱٥ ............................................... WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪۱۱۷ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪۱۱۸ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ‪۱۱۸ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۱۱۸ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪۱۱۹ ...................................CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۲۰ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۱۲۱ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ )‪۱۰۳ .............................................. (Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪۱۲۲ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۰۳ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪۱۰٤ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ‪۱۰٥ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۱۲۳ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۲٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲٤ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ‪۱۲٤ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۱۲٥ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪۱۲٥ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲٦ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۲٦ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱۲٦ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۲۷ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‪۱۲۷ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۲۷ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱۲۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۲۸ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪۱۲۸ ........................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱۲۹ .....................‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۲۹ .............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪۱۲۹ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۳۰ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪۱۳۰ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪۱۳۱ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪۱۳۱ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱۳۱ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪۱۳۲ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۳٦ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪۱۳۷ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۱۳۷ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۱۳۷ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۳۸ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪۱۳۸ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۱۳۸ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪۱۳۸ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪۱۳۹ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‪۱٤۰ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪۱٤۰ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱٤۱ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱٤۱ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۱٤۲ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪۱٤۲ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱٤۲ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪۱٤۲ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ‪۱٤۲ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ‪۱٤۳ ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱٤٤ ............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪۱۳۳ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱٤٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱۳۳ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ‪۱٤٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱٤٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱٤٥ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱٤٥ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳۳ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪۱۳۳ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ‪۱۳٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱۳٤ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱۳٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۱۳٥ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱۳٥ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱۳٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱۳٦ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‪۱۳٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٤٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ ‪۱٤٦ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٤۷ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٤۸ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٤۸ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪۱٤۹ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ ‪۱٤۹ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٤۹ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٤۹ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪۱٥۰ ...............................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٥۰ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ‪۱٥۰ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥۱ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٥۱ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱٥۱ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪۱٥۱ .................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٥۲ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪۱٥۲ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪۱٥۲ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥۲ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥۲ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۱۷٤ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ‪۱٥۳ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‪۱۷٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪۱٥۳ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪۱۷٦ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۱۷٦ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪۱۷۷ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱۷۷ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱٥۷ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱٥۹ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‪۱٥۹ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱٥۹ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(‪۱٦۰ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٦۰ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪۱٦۱ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٦۱ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱٦۲ ............................................................................... FUNC.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٦۳ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ“ ‪۱٦۷ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ ‪۱٦۸ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“ ‪۱٦۸ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ‪۱٦۹ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪۱٦۹ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱٦۹ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪۱۷۰ .................................................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ( ‪۱۷۰ .........................‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۱۷۰ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۷۱ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪۱۷۱ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۷۱ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۷۲ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪۱۷۲ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪۱۷۲ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۱۷۲ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۷۳ .............................................................. NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۷۳ ...............................................CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ(‬
‫‪۳۳ = ,۳۱ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪٥٦ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺛﻠﻭﺝ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫‪۷٤ = ,٥۷ = ,۳۱ = -‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪۳۱ = -‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫● ﻛﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ = ‪٦۳ = ,٤۱‬‬‫● ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ )ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫‪۳۳ = -‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ‬
‫)= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫‪۸۳ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫‪۹۰ = -‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ = ‪۱٤۲‬‬‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ = ‪۱٤٥‬‬‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۸٦ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۹۳ = -‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪۱۰۳ = -‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ = ‪٦٤ = ,۳۱‬‬‫● ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ = ‪۸۳‬‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱٤٦ = -‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫● ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ = ‪۱٤٥‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ = ‪۱۰۷‬‬‫● ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ = ‪۱۱۸‬‬‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪۱۲۷ = -‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻫﻧﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﺃﻧﺕ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻔﻪ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ( ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺿﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺑﺻﺭﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻭﺍﺻﻑ ﺭﻋﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻭﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻬﺏ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﻐﺳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻧﻬﻡ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻏﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺣﻅ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﻣﻌﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻭﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﱠﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻁﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺑﺩﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻣﺗﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﺣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺿﻌﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﻌﺩﻯ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻧﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻁﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻛﻙ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺗﻙ ﺑﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺿﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺻﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻁﺊ ﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺗﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﺎﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ– ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﻛﻭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺟﻠﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺏ ﺳﺭﻭﺍﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﻟﻠﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻌﺻﻣﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻋﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ )‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫) ˻(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :CB-2LY‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ )‪ (۱‬ﻭﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫● ‪ :CB-2LYE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪CB-2LY‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪CB-2LYE‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ )‪ (۱‬ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺯﺡ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ )‪ (۲‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۰‬‬
‫● ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ(‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪۲٤۰‬‬
‫ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫) ˻(‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫)˻(‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ )‪ (۲‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺻﺩﺭﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۱‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺑﻁء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪(۱۹‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻳﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪ ،(۱٤۱ = ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۹٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲٥‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ )= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪(۱۰٦ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪.(۱٤٥‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪) .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱٥۹‬‬
‫) ́(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)˼(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۳۳ = ،۳۱ = ،۲۱‬‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫)= ‪.(٥٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ )= ‪.(٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،P‬ﻭ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ )= ‪.(۸۰ = ،٦۷‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫)˾(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫)˽(‬
‫) ̀(‬
‫) ˿(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(۸٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ )‪ (۲‬ﺑﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫) ˻( ) ˺(‬
‫● ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ )= ‪.(۱٦۸ = – ۱٦۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ (٤۳‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۱٤‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ )‪ (۱‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ (٤‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪ (۱٤٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪،۲٥‬‬
‫= ‪(۱۳٥ = ،۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ )= ‪ ،(۸۱ = ،۸۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺃﺣﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﺻﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻁﻘﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻌﻳﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(۳٦ = ،۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ )ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )‪ (۱‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﻧﺑًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )‪(.(۲‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫) ˻(‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺟﺯء ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ )ﺍﻟﺗﻲ( ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪Story Highlights‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۰۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(۳۱ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪“(Smart Auto‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۳۱‬ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )‪(۳۱ =) “(Smart Auto‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫‪ ۱٦‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٤۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺣﻣﻳًﺎ )= ‪(۹۱‬‬‫ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )= ‪ (۱۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ◄‬
‫]ﺑﻼ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ )= ‪.(۸٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺻﻭﺍ ًﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۳٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺩﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺿًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ( )= ‪.(۳٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ )‪ (۱‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺻﺩﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[ )= ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء[ ◄‬
‫]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻅﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ‬
‫*‬
‫ﺭﺿﻊ ﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺭﺿﻊ ﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫‪۳٥‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻏﺭﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻛﺷﺎﻓﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻡ*‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫*‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻥ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻅﻼﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪drive mode‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [ )= ‪ (٤۲ = ،۳٦‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫ﻭﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٤۹‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺗﺳﻣﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺎﺋﻣﻳﻥ( ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ )ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻳﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ )ﻣﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺛﻧﻰ ﻋﺷﺭ ﻋﺎﻣًﺎ( ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ )= ‪ .(٤٤‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٦۷‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻹﺧﺑﺎﺭﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ‬
‫)ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻡ‬
‫)ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻛﺄﻓﺿﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻧﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺿﻲء ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪ AF-‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻔﻭﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻓﺭﺻﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳٦‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ )ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ(*‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪.(Hybrid IS) macro‬‬
‫[ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻳﺭ )ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻲء ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )ﻓﻌّﺎﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ )ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪.(IS‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻔﺎﻋﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪ .(۷۹‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ‪.IS‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ( ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭ ًﺑﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۲۰x‬ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٦۷‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻪ‬
‫ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ )‪ (۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‬‫)‪.(ZoomPlus‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ :‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫● ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )= ‪ ،(٤۸‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ – ﺑﺣﺙ(‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺩﺕ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪،۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ ◄ (۲۸‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )=‪.(٤۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ )= ‪ (۷٤‬ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻛﺱ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪.Auto‬‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﺃﻁﺭ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺛﻧﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻷﻁﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﻬﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ،Auto‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫[‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻌﺎﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﺭ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪٤۰‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ ◄ ]‬
‫]‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ(“ )= ‪ (٤۰‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﻘﺩﺕ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻙ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﺳﻬﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪.(۳۹ =) Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻭ ﻛﻧﺕ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(“ )= ‪ ،(۳۹‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(“ )= ‪ (۳۹‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ ◄ ]ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺳﺭﺍﻉ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪ (۳۱‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[ )= ‪ (٤۹‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻛﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ )= ‪ ،(۹۳‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )= ‪ (۸۷‬ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹۱‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ (۸٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(۹۱‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫)= ‪ (۸۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۸۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪ (۹٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ (۹۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪(۱٤٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۰‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ .(۱٥۲‬ﻭﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ )= ‪ (۸۷‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ )= ‪ً (۸۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻠﻬﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﺎﺋﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ‪Story Highlights‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ( ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺅﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(٤۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۲‬ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻭﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼً ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻫﺅﻻء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻛﺄﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺷﺎﺭﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﻳﻥ ”ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ“ ﻭ“ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻣﻝء ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺱ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻛﺎﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﻳﻥ )ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ‪ ،(٥‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺳﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻛﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻭﺗﺎﺑﻌﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻣﻭﻫﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﻫﻬﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺗﻅﻡ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ(‬
‫)= ‪.(۸٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪ (۷۷ = ،٤۲‬ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻛﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻊ‪.[.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻊ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻭﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﻫﻬﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﻧﻣﻭﻫﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻧﺗﻅﺎﻡ؛‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﻥ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(٤٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﻑ[‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ( ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٤‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼً ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﻲء ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻭﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻣﻝء ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ؛ ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ؛ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﻱٍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻏﻭﺑﺔ )= ‪ ،(٤٦‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪ (٤٤‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻣﻪ )= ‪ (۸٦‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ )= ‪ (۸۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻪ )= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ُ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪ُ .‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫)ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪(۳:٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ٤۲۰) A2‬ﻣﻡ × ‪ ٥۹٤‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۲۱۰ × ۱٤۸ − ٤۲۰ × ۲۹۷) A5 – A3‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ۱۸۰ × ۱۳۰ ،‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪٤۸‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ ﺑﺻﺑﻐﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺑﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﺯﺋﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪ ،(٤۲‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺎ‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺎﺭﺿًﺎ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺧﻁﻭﻁ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۰‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻗﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﻛﺑﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺟﺩًﺍ‬‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺎﻣﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪(۳۷‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪(۷٤ =) AF‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪(۱٤۲‬‬‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻷﻋﻳﻧﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ )ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[IS‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ ﺑﺄﻋﻳﻥ ﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۱‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺻﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻅ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪.(۷۷ = ,٤۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،[IS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫)= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪“IS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٥۱‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪AF-‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٥۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ[ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪[AF-‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪ ،[.‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺳﺭﻳﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ 4 ،‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﺣﻔﻅ[ )= ‪.(٥۳‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ )= ‪ (٥۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺳﺭﻳﻊ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪(۹۱‬‬‫ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪(۹٦‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ )= ‪(۹۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻋﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺧﻔﻭ ًﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﻭﺭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺷﺎﺣﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ )ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻁﺑﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻌﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﺳﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻣﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ )ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﻳﺛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪٥۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (٦۹ =) ISO‬ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪.(۳۹ =) Auto‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﻁﻭﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫)ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺟﻳﺔ )ﺛﻠﺞ(‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﺛﻠﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (٦۹ =) ISO‬ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻣﻧﺣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻫﻭ ] [ )‪ (2592 x 1944‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ(‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﱢ ﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ )ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻗﺩﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٥۹‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺷﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋُﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۰‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٥۹‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ )ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺱ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ .(٤۸‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ،۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻓ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺭﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۱‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٥۹‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٥۹‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻭﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ )ﺗﺑﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪،‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ ،(٥۹‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺑﺳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ (٥۷‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺳﻣًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﺑﺳﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺳﻡ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻓﻣﻬﻡ ﺑﻭﺳﻊ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻧﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪ (٥۱‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻣﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻏﻣﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻏﻣﺯ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﺑﺗﺄﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﻣﺯ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺑﻁء‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻐﻁﺎﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻧﻳﻥ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﻬﻣﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻐﻣﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۱‬ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪ (٥۱‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻳﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻣﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻭﺭ( ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ .(۷٤‬ﻳﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻔﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺎﺯﻟﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺿﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ‪ (.‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻬﻙ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺿﻣﺎﻣﻙ ﻟﻶﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ )= ‪ (٥۱‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪.(۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺿﺎﻋﻑ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ‪ -‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ“‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٤۹‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎءﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ -۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ −2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪Story Highlights‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۰۳‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(٥۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ[ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ“ )= ‪ (٥۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻳُﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪2x‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1x‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪1/2x‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻑ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﺣً ﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٤۹‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪iFrame‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.iFrame‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫● ‪ iFrame‬ﻫﻭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪Apple Inc.‬‬
‫● ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٤۹‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۷۹ = – ٦۸‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۷‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ )= ‪.(۱٦۱‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (٦۹ =) ISO‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،(۷۷ = ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۷ =) FUNC.‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ )ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،AE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۸‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺣﺩﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺿﻣﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ ،(AE‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۹‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪200 ,100 ,80‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪800 ,400‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪3200 ,1600‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﻗﻳ ًﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۹۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ ،(WB‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﻳﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ(“ )= ‪ (۷۰‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ؛ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Tungsten‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻫﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fluorescent H‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻟﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻟﻁﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺟﻣﻊ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺛﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﺗﻳﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﻣﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻣﻳﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺷﺭﺍ ًﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺑﺎﻝ ﻭﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺷﺭﺍ ًﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺷﺭﺍ ًﻗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫)= ‪.(۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫–‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪ (۷۰‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺷﺑﱡﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪.٥ – ۱‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪ (۷۰‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻗﻭﻯ‪/‬ﺃﻛﺑﺭ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺿﻌﻑ‪/‬ﺃﻓﺗﺢ )ﺃﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻓﺗﺢ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ )‪(Macro‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪ MF‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)‪ ،۱‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ( ﻭﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[ ﻭﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪.MF‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ )ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻥ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪ (۷۳ =) AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ[ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻻﻁﺎﺭ ‪(۷۳ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۳۷‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫)= ‪ (۷۳‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪ ،(۱٤۲‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ ‪ ۱٫٦x‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ۲٫۰x‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻣﺎ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ‪.[MF-‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻥ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪(MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺃﺳﻬﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭ)ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ( ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪ [MF‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪) AF‬ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪ MF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻗﺭﺑًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ(“‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺛﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﺻﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺻﻐﻳﺭ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۳۷‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪ (۷۳‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪.(۷۲‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ ،AF‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪[AF‬‬
‫)= ‪ (٥۰‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﻣﻲ ﻓﻘﻁ( ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )] [ ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﻳﻥ ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷٤‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪(AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪(۷۳=) “AF‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪.[AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ )ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۷٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺧﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻲء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻫﺩ ًﻓﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷٥‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ ،(۷۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺳﺟﻼ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪ .(٤۳‬ﻭﺭﻏﻡ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺷﺧﺻًﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻣﺎﺅﻫﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ )= ‪ (۷٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﻁﺎﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻗﺭﻳﺏ ﺟﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫] [ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺫﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ( )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ [AF‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺟﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪.MF‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٥۷‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪ (۷۲‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪،(۷٦ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ] [ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،(۳۹ =) Auto‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺧﺗﺭﺕ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] [ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۱‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﻲء‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻁﺊ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ ،(٦۸‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +2‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺑﻘﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺑﻬﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ◄ ]ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪] ◄ [FE‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۲۸‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ◄ ]ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (۲۸‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(٦۸ =) AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﺩﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ] [ )ﻓﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ( ﻭ] [ )ﺩﻗﻳﻕ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۷۱‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[؛ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،FE‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ FE‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ (٥۱‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([Tv‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺫﻛﺎ ًء ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﻌﻘﻳ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪[IS‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ۲۰۰۰/۱‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۲۰۰۰/۱‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ۱٫۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ [80] ISO‬ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ )= ‪.(۸۱‬‬
‫● ]‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([Av‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۷۲‬ﻭ“ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺯﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫● ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪ (۲۸‬ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﺄﻓﺿﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫)˻( ) ˺(‬
‫) ˼(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫) ˽(‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۸۱‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )‪ (۱‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ ،(۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪ (٤‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ )‪.(۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ )ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪) ۲‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ۱٫۳‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ [80] ISO‬ﻭﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﺿﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٦۸‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‪] ،‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪] ،‬‬
‫]‬
‫[‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ◄ ]ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ◄‬
‫]ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ ◄ ]ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (۲۸‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻭﺗﺻﻔﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪.(۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﻣﺧﻔﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸٤‬‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ ◄ (۲۸‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩﻩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۸٤‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪GPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪،Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ .(۱۲۹‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.GPS‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ )‪) (UTC‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﺗﻘﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ [---‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪) Coordinated Universal Time :UTC‬ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺳﱠﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺟﺭﻳﻧﺗﺵ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۸٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (۸٤‬ﻫﻭ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۳۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑـ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻪ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪.(۸٤‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ )= ‪ ،(۸٤‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﻳﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ◄‬
‫]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﺭﺍﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻋﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹۱‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ )= ‪ (۹۳‬ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺳﺟﻝ )= ‪.(٤٤‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪.(۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ )= ‪ (۷۷ = ،٥۷ = ،٤۲‬ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥٦‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑـ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺛﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﺣﺙ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪” (۲‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“ )= ‪ ،(۸٦‬ﻭ“ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ ،(۸۹‬ﻭ“ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“‬
‫)= ‪ .(۹۰‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۹۱‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“ )= ‪” ،(۹٤‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱٥۰ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱٥۲‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪ ،(۱۰۲ = – ۹۷‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻅﺕ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﺳﻣﺎﺋﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۸‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،(۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“ )= ‪ (۸٦‬ﻭﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ .(۸۹‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۹۱‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“ )= ‪ (۹٤‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪“(DPOF‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥۰‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪،(۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪MENU‬‬
‫)= ‪ ◄ (۲۸‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ◄ ]ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ )ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٥٦‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ“ )= ‪ ،(۸٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٤٦‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ )‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ۱۰x‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻣﺎء“‬
‫)= ‪ ,(۸۸‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﻼﺙ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫]ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺑﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ[‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (۲٥‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )= ‪ ،(۸۷‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱﱟ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻣﺗﻌﺔ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌَ ﺭَ ﺿﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۹۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪ .(۲۷‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻣﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‬‫ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )= ‪(۸۷‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )= ‪(۸۷‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪،(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۹۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۹۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻛﺂﺧﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻓﺗﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۹۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪۹۳‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪.[ ] (۹۲‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٤‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪ (۹۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۹٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪ ،(۹٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻼﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۹٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪” ،(۸۳‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪” ،(۹۰‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(۹۱‬ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(۹۳‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪” ،(۱٥۰ =) “(DPOF‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪(۱٥۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۹٥‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ ،(۹۱‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪.(۱۰۳‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺑﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﺟﻭﻡ )‬
‫( ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 8‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .Windows 7‬ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۰۰ = – ۹۷‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫) ˼(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻪ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ )‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ )‪.(۳‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫‪۹۸‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫[]‬
‫[] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺣﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺈﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ] [ )= ‪.(٤۸‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ] [ )= ‪ (٤۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۹۷‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﱠ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺫﺑﺔ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪.(۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻟﺔ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ(“ )= ‪.(۷۰‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۷‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻘﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺻﻭﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ( ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﺋﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۷‬‬
‫‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺧﺎﻁﺊ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫]ﻋﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۹۷‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.(۳۳ = ،‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪،(۸۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫) ˺(‬
‫● )‪ (۱‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ)‪ (۲‬ﻫﻭ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫) ˻(‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻓﻲ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺻﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ] [‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﺹ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﻣﻥ ] [( ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺹ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻗﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻗﺻﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺫﺕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫)ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪.(۱٤۱ = ،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (۸٥‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ( )= ‪ (۳۳‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁﺔ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫] [ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ )‪(Story Highlights‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺔ ﻟﻛﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺿﻳﻑ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )‪ (= ۹٦‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﻳﺩ ﻟﻸﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻁﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻼﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺷﻬﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺣﻝ ﻧﻣﻭﻫﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻟﻸﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻫﻳﺋﺔ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺷﻐﻭﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻛﻔﻳﻠﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ )= ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻧﺻﻑ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻸﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬‫ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(۳۳‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻳﻘﺩﺭ ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻛﻳﻑ ﺳﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭﻱ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪Story‬‬
‫‪ ،Highlights‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﺩﺭﺝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪ (۱۰۳ =) “(Story Highlights‬ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪ ،(۱۰۳ =) “(Story Highlights‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ (۱۰۳ =) “(Highlights‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ [BGM‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻻ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺧﺎﻟﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﻓﻘﻁ ‪[BGM‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ]ﻣﺳﺎﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ‪ [BGM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ ،(۱۰۳ =) “(Highlights‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑـ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺷﺧﺹ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ[‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻭﺳﻳﻘﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﺑﻭﻡ“ )= ‪,(۱۰٤‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻥ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ ،(۱۰۳ =) “(Highlights‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ )‪Story‬‬
‫‪ (۱۰۳ =) “(Highlights‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﻧﺎﺩًﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ؟[‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺧﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪۱٥‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻭﺣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻻً ”ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺩﻋﻡ ‪ (DPS over IP‬ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪(۱۰۷ =) NFC‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪) NFC‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 4.0‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﺯﺭ ] [ )= ‪(۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(۱۰۹‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۱۱۰ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ )ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣُﺿﻣﱠﻧﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻌﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺫﻳﻥ ﻳﻘﻭﻣﻭﻥ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺗﻬﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪NFC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪) Android‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 4.0‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺙ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )= ‪ .(۱۲۹‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺂﺧﺭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ NFC‬ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Google Play‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪Camera‬‬
‫‪ ،Connect‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺩء ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳِ ﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺻﻁﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺿﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺄﺳﻳﺱ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬‫ﺗﺫﻛﺭﻙ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۱۳۱ =) ۲‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻣﺗﻠﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .( ) N‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲٤‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [NFC] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ (۱۰۷ =) “NFC‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺟﻝ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۱۲٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ‪Camera‬‬
‫‪ (۱۰۷ =) Connect‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻟﻙ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،iPad‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪SSID‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۱۳۱ =) ۲‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ ◄ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻣﺗﻠﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ .( ) N‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪(.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،iPad‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Android‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻓﻲ ‪Google Play‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳِ ﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻫﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٥‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻻ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٥‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲٤‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۱۷‬ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺑﺎﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ“ )= ‪ (۱۰۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۰‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ“ )= ‪ (۱۱۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺻﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ“ )= ‪ (۱۰۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.(۱۱۰ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ (۱۱۰ =) “Wi-Fi‬ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۸‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.(۱۱٥ =) “WPS‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺄﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪.http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻠﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻬﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ Mac OS X 10.8.2‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭﻳﻥ ‪ Windows 7 Starter‬ﻭ‪.Home Basic‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻧﻅﺎﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪) Windows 7 N‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﻭﺑﻲ( ﻭ‪) KN‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻭﺭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻧﻭﺑﻳﺔ( ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ‪ Windows Media Feature Pack‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://go.microsoft.com/fwlink/?LinkId=159730‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺗﻛﺎﻟﻳﻑ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ ISP‬ﻭﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[ ◄ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄ ]‪ ،[Canon Utilities‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ]‪ [Canon Utilities‬ﺑﻣﺟﻠﺩ ]ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻓﺭﺍﻍ ﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻣﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[ ◄ ]ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ[ ◄‬
‫]‪◄ [CameraWindow] ◄ [Canon Utilities‬‬
‫]‪/Wi-Fi connection setup‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Windows‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ )ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ( ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬‫ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ )ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ( ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺑﺭﻭﺗﻭﻛﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )‪.(ICMP‬‬‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ )‪.(UPnP‬‬‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”‪.(۱۷۰ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۱٥ = WPS‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ )= ‪ .(۱۱۷‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪(SSID/ESSID‬‬
‫ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ESSID‬ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ُﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺳﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪ /‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪WPA2-PSK :‬‬
‫)‪ (AES‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (TKIP) WPA2-PSK‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (AES) WPA-PSK‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (TKIP) WPA-PSK‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) WEP‬ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻁﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ”ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ WEP‬ﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ”‪ “۱‬ﻛﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ‪ WPS‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪.[MAC‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ‪ WPS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ ،[WPS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،[PBC‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WPS‬ﻟﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫‪ Windows‬ﻓﻘﻁ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫”ﺍﺑﺩﺃ“ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Downloads‬‬
‫‪/Images From Canon Camera‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪.[Canon‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻧﻘﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟً ﺎ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/OK‬ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﻔﻅﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۱۳۱ =) ۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ ،CameraWindow‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ [PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٦‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۸‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۱٦‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]*[‬
‫ﻟﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(۱۱٥ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪.(۱۱٥ =) “WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۸‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(۱۱٥ =) “WPS‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (۱۱٥ =) “WPS‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪ (۱۱۷‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻹﺗﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ )‪ ،Microsoft Internet Explorer‬ﺇﻟﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )‪.(http://www.canon.com/cig/‬‬
‫● ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺑًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ُﺗﻔﺭَ ﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ http://www.canon.com/cig/‬ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ ﺑﻙ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺿﻭ )ﻣﺟﺎ ًﻧﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻫﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۷‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۷‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪“WPS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۱٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۱۷‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑـ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻘﺎء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺗﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪٦‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ (۱۱۹ =) “GATEWAY‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻣﺕ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ )= ‪ (۱۲۷‬ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫]‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺩءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ .GATEWAY‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(۱۳۱ =) ۳‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﺭﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳِ ﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲٤‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Canon Online Photo Album‬ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪ Online Photo Album‬ﻟـ ‪ iPhones‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPads‬ﻣﻥ ‪ App Store‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Android‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Google Play‬ﻭﺛﺑﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛ ًﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪SSID‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪۱۲۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[]‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٤٦‬‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠ ﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‪.‬ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۰‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳِ ﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻧﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ◄ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ ◄ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲٤‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪،(۱۲٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪.(۹٦‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪،(۱۲٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﻔﺿﻼﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ[ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪،(۱۲٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪ (۹۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻊ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ) ( ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪،‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .(٤ =) Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻳﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺿﻐﻁﻬﺎ )= ‪ ،(۱۰۲‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻭﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺇﻻ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﺳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﻟﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻻ[ ﻛﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ◄ (۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] ◄ [Wi-Fi‬ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[◄‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﺗﻌﻠﻳ ًﻘﺎ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻳﺎ )ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪.iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺿﻑ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.(۱۱۹ =) “CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﻹﺷﻣﺎﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ,(۱۱۸ =) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ )ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻭﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۳‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻧﻭﻱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ .CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪،‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻗﺩ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ]‬
‫ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ“ )= ‪.(۱۲۱‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫)ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً‪.(۱٤۱ = ،‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ .GATEWAY‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ ،iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻼً ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ ،(Canon OPA) Canon Online Photo Album‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۲۷‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Canon Online Photo Album‬ﻟـ ‪ iPhones‬ﺃﻭ ‪ iPads‬ﻣﻥ ‪App‬‬
‫‪ Store‬ﺃﻭ ﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪ Android‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Google Play‬ﻭﺛﺑﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪ ،(۱۱۹ =) CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪.iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ ،Canon Online Photo Album‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪Canon‬‬
‫‪.Online Photo Album‬‬
‫‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪.Camera Connect‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫● ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪(۱۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ )= ‪(۱۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳۰ = ،۱۱۰ = ،۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪Camera‬‬
‫‪ Connect‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺧﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪ .(۱۹‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۳٤‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻶﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻅﻬﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻌﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۰ = ،۱۰۹‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺗﻌﻭﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ FUNC.‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ MENU‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ )= ‪(۱۳۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ )= ‪(۱۰۹‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[ )= ‪(۱۳۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ : O‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫– ‪ :‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۳۰‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۲۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۳۰‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۲۹‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﺻﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋِ ﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.(۲۸ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺩﺭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ (۸۳‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۲۷ =) .FUNC‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .(۲۸ =) MENU‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ] ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱۹‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺯﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﺩﻭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ .(۲٤‬ﻭﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ )= ‪.(۲٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ 0‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ ۱‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱٥۹‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺷﺭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺟً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (۱۳٥‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ (.‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻠﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﻁﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﻠﻥ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )‪ (۹۹۹۹ – ۰۰۰۱‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲،۰۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )=‪ ،(۱۳٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۳٦‬ﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۳٦‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ۹۹۹۹‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۰۰۰۱‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ،۰۰۰۱‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‪.(۱۳٦ = ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻳﻭﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،(۳۱‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪،(۷۲ =) MF‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ‪/‬ﺳﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺩﻡ‪/‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.[ft/in‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫● ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ )= ‪(۱٤۳‬‬
‫● ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۱۰٦ =) [Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ]ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ[ )= ‪(۱۰۹‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺭﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪ (۱۳٤‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ )= ‪(۱۳٤‬‬‫ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۱۳۸‬ﻭ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ )= ‪(۱٤۳‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬‫[ )= ‪ (٥۷‬ﻭ] [ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۱۰٦ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪*NB-6LH‬‬
‫‪*CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪) USB‬ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪*(Mini-B :‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪*(D‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‬
‫‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪.(IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼً ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﻋﻥ ‪ ۲٫٥‬ﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪ACK-DC40‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺛﻝ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﻕ ﻟﻙ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺩ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫● ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫● ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻣﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ NB-6L‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ACK-DC40 AC‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪.(۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪HD‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ )ﻻ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻁﻭﻟﻪ ﻋﻥ ‪ ۲٫٥‬ﻡ ﺑﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ Type D‬ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ(‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ]‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ٍ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣ ﱢﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪AVC-DC400ST‬‬
‫)ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﻭﺍﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ“ )= ‪ (۱٤۲‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ‪(PAL‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ (٥۰ =) AF‬ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ‪MF-‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۷۲‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪ (۷۳ =) MF‬ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC ACK-DC40‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۷‬ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ )‪ (۱‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺛﻠﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.((۱۷‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۷‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺯﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ‪CameraWindow‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬‫● ‪Image Transfer Utility‬‬
‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۲۷‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫● ‪Map Utility‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺍﺋﻁ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﻔﻅﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫● ‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫● ‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫● ‪Mac OS X 10.8‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪.(۱۱۳‬‬
‫‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪) USB‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً؛ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،(Mini-B :‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ .(۱‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻷﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.CameraWindow‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑـ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪Downloads Images From Canon‬‬
‫‪/Camera‬ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ ،[Canon‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Import Images from Camera‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Import‬‬
‫‪/Untransferred Images‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤٦‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ‪،CameraWindow‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺣﻔﻅﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫● ‪ :Windows 7‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫]‪ [CameraWindow‬ﻓﻲ ‪.Dock‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ؛ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫‪) USB‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ؛ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.(Mini-B :‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٤٦‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٤۷‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫[]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٤۷‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[] [] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۷‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪ (۱٤٦‬ﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳ ًﻁﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ L‬ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.٤:۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱۳۰ × ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٤۸‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪۱٤۹‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۱٤۸‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٤٦‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯﻳﻥ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﺃﻭ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ )= ‪ (۱٥۱‬ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪.(DPOF) Digital Print Order Format‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺭﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ٍ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ )= ‪.(۱۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‪ ۹۹‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۰‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪ (۹۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۰‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۰‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۱ = – ۱٥۰‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻵﻥ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻬﺎﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪ DPOF‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺷﺭﺍء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۲‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۱٥۲‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۲‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٥۲‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺗﻘﺩ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺅ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ ﻣﺛﻼً ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺭﺍء ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻔﺧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ )= ‪.(۱٤۲‬‬
‫‪۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪ ،(۸۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲٥‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )= ‪.(۲٦‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۳٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻝء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٤۸‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۳٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ [IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۲٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪.(۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪ [AF-‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ‪.macro‬‬
‫ﺟﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪.(۷٦ = ،۷٤ =) AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٦۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٦۸ = ،٦۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٦۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۹۹ = ،٦۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ )= ‪.(٦۸ = ،٦۸‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۷۱‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۸۲ = ،۷۸‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۷۱‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۸۲ = ،۷۸‬‬
‫ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻛﺎﺱ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٥۷‬‬
‫ﱡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪ [.‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪ .(٥۳‬ﺳﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪ (٤‬ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺟﺭﺏ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪.(۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“‪ ،‬ﻭ“ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ “FUNC.‬ﻭ“ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱٦۷ = – ۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ .(٤۳‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻼﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ ،(٤٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Story Highlights‬ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۷۱ = ،۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬
‫‬‫=‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ) ‪.(٤۹‬‬‫=‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ) ‪.(۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٦۰‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Story Highlights‬ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺳﻁﺔ )= ‪ ،(۸٤‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻸﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ Story Highlights‬ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۲٤‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]‪ ،[B‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )= ‪ (۱۳۳‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ]ﺻﺎﻣﺕ[ )= ‪ ،(۱۳۳‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺿﻌﻳ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٦۰‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥٥‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻛﺑﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪ Camera Connect‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ CameraWindow‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۱۱٤ = ,۱۱۳ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺗﺩﻋﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ .(۱۷۰‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪ .(۱۲۷‬ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪/.‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻁﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.(۱۳۲ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺟﺏ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ!‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۲‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۷‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۸۰ = ،٦۷ = ،٥٥ = ،۳۱‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ .(۹۷‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹۳‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۷‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻣﻲ! )= ‪(۹۱‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪/MOV‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪MP٤‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺋﻪ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/.‬ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻣﺔ )*( ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ* )= ‪ ،(۸۸‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ* )= ‪ ،(۸۹‬ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ* )= ‪،(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ* )= ‪ ،(۹٥‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪ ،(۹٦‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ* )= ‪ ،(۹۷‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ* )= ‪،(۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ* )= ‪.(۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ ،(۱٥۱ = ،۹٤ = ،۹۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ .(۱٥۲‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۱٥۲‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻘﺩ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۹۱‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ )= ‪ (۹۳‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫)= ‪ (۹٦‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٥۰‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (۹۹۹‬ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (۹۹۹۹‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪ (۱۳۷‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻠﻭءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ (‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )‪ (Exx‬ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٤٦‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )= ‪ .(۱٤۸‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺻﺣﻳﺣً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫● ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۱۱٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻁﺋﺔ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻣﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ُﺗﺣﺟﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ‪،Bluetooth‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺗﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﺗﻛﻔﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (۹۹۹‬ﻭﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (۹۹۹۹‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﻣﺯﻳﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۲۷‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪،(۷۳ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪(٦۸ =) AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ(‬
‫)‪ (۲۲‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۸۱ = ،۸۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۰‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء )= ‪(۳٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۳‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸۱ = ،۸۱‬‬
‫) ́˻(‬
‫) ̂˻(‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫)˾˺()˽˺( )˼˺()˻˺()˺˺(‬
‫) ́˺(‬
‫) ̂˺(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫)˻(‬
‫)˼(‬
‫) (‬
‫˽ )˾(‬
‫)˿(‬
‫)̀(‬
‫)́(‬
‫)̂(‬
‫) ˹˺(‬
‫) ˹˻(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫) ˻˼( ) ˺˼( ) ˹˼(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۲‬ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(۷۹‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫)‪ (۳۳‬ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪(۷۲ =) MF‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٦‬ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫) ̀˻(‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(۳۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۱‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۳٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٥‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫)̀˺( )˿˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫)‪ (۳٤‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫) ˿˻( ) ˾˻( ) ˽˻(‬
‫) ˼˼(‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫) ˼˻(‬
‫) ˻˻( ) ˺˻(‬
‫) ˽˼(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪،(۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ )= ‪(۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(۷۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱٥۹‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۸۲ = ،۷۸‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪،(۷۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )= ‪(٤۸‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪(۱۳٥‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪(۳٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(۳٦ =) IS‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )= ‪*(۱۷۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٤۹‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫‪(۷۷ =) Drive mode‬‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ )= ‪ ،(٤۹‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )= ‪،(۳۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪(۷۳‬‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪،(۷۲ = ،۷۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(۷٦ =) AF‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ )= ‪(۱۷۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬
‫‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۱‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(٦۸ =) AE‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(۷۹ =) FE‬‬
‫)‪(۲۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٤‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪ (۲۷‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ )= ‪(۳۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۸‬ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ )= ‪(۳۱‬‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ—ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫]ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ—ﻗﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫)‪ (۲۷‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( )= ‪/ (۷۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )=‪،(٤۹= ،٤۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪،(۳۳‬‬
‫‪) MP4‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪(۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)˺˺( )˹˺( )̂()́()̀()˿()˾()˽(‬
‫)˼( )˻(‬
‫)˺(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫)˿˺(‬
‫)˾˺(‬
‫)˼˺(‬
‫)˽˺(‬
‫)‪ (۲۸‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )= ‪(۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪(۱۷۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۹‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻛﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪.(۱٤۲‬‬
‫)˻˺(‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫)̂˻(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫)˹˻( )̂˺( )́˺( )̀˺(‬
‫)˻˻( )˺˻(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫)́˻(‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)̀˻( )˾˻(‬
‫)˿˻(‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۳‬‬
‫)˼˻(‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫)˽˻(‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(۸۳ = ،۳۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ )= ‪(۸٥‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱٥۹‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻭﺓ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪(۱۲٦ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪ ،(۷۷‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)= ‪(۷۸‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪،(۹۷‬‬
‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )= ‪(۹٦‬‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪(۹۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ – ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ )= ‪(۱۳۷‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱٦۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۸۱ = ،۸۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸۱ = ،۸۱‬‬
‫‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ )= ‪،(٤۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )= ‪(٥٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۱‬ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪(۹۹ = ،۷۰‬‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )= ‪) (۱۰۲‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪) (۱۰۲‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪(۱۰۲ = ،‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۲‬ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪(۷۲ = ،۷۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱۰۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۳‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪،(۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪.(۱٤٦ =) PictBridge‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٤‬ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٥‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫)= ‪(٤۹ = ،٤۸‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٦‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ )= ‪(۸۷‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ*‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪/AE‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪*(۷۹ = ،٦۸ =) FE‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ*‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AE‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ(‪/‬ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪*(٦٥‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ )= ‪(۷٦ = ،۷۲ = ،۷۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(۷۷‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.FUNC‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(٦۹ =) ISO‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ FE‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪3200 / 1600 / 800 / 400 / 200 / 100 / 80‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۷۸‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ )= ‪(۷۰‬‬
‫‪۱٦۲‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪(۲٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺩﻑ ‪(۷٤ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۸۲‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪(۷۷ =) Drive Mode‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫*‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٤۹‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪(٤۸‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ٤‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ٤‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ٤‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ‪ :٥ – ۱‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ] [ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AF‬ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(٦۰‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪(۷۳ =) AF‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪*AiAF‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )= ‪(۷۹‬‬
‫‪۱٦۳‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )= ‪(٤۸‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ٤‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ‪*(۷۳ =) AF‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪(٥۲ =) AF-‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪2x/4x‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪(۷٥‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﺁﻣﻥ )= ‪(۷۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۱٦٤‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻭﻡ ‪(۷۲ =) MF-‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪(۷٦ =) AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪(٥۰ =) AF‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪1.6x/2.0x‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )= ‪(۳۷‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪/ ۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ )= ‪(٤۹‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻵﻣﻥ )= ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦٥‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۸۲ = ،۷۸ = ،٥۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﻣﺭ‪/‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺃﺻﻔﺭ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻥ ‪FE‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪/‬ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪(۷۳ =) MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(٥۰‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء )= ‪(۳٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪۱٦٦‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ 4/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ 8/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(٥۳‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۷۹ =) IS‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪(۳۸‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪/‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )= ‪(٤۰ = ،۳۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫= ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪/‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﻠﻪ‪/‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪/‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫= ‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(۳۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻼ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫= ‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪ ،(٤۳‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪،‬‬‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۳٥ = ,۲٥‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫= ‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء‬
‫= ‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫= ‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫= ‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪۹۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫= ‪۹۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫= ‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫= ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫= ‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫= ‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫= ‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫= ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‬
‫= ‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫= ‪۸۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫= ‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪۸۳‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫= ‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬
‫= ‪۸۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻟﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻗﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﺛﺭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﺣﻛﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻣﺢ ﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﻳﻑ ﺗﺩﺭﻳﺟﻳًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦۹‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﺑﺧﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۲۰٫۳‬ﻣﻠﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺿﻌ ًﻔﺎ‪) 4.5 :‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( – ‪) 135.0‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ‪mm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫)ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪) 25 :‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ( – ‪) 750‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ( ‪(mm‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD TFT‬ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۷٫٥‬ﺳﻡ )‪ ۳٫۰‬ﺑﻭﺻﺔ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ۹۲۲،۰۰۰ :‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪،Design rule for Camera File system‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪) DPOF‬ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪(1.1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪(JPEG) Exif 2.3 :‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) MP4 :‬ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‪MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 :‬؛‬
‫ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪) MPEG-4 AAC-LC :‬ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ((‬
‫‪Hi-speed USB‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻲ )ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ(‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻠﻲ )‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC ACK-DC40‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪ ۳٤٫۸ x ٦٥٫۸ x ۱۱۲٫۷‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪(CIPA‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ )ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ۲٦۹‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ‪ ۲٤٥ (CIPA‬ﺟﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪*IEEE 802.11b/g/n‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﻫﺭﺗﺯ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ‪(IEEE 802.11g/n) OFDM‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ‪(IEEE 802.11b) DSSS‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ*‪ ،۱‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ*‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﺩﻋﻡ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫*‪Wi-Fi CERTIFIED IBSS ۲‬‬
‫‪۱۱ – ۱‬‬
‫‪،(AES/TKIP) WPA-PSK ،WEP‬‬
‫‪(AES/TKIP) WPA2-PSK‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ۲۳۰‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ*‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ*‪(۲‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ*‬
‫‪ ۳۱٥‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪ ۱٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ )ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫‪ ۳۰۰۰ – ۲٥‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‬
‫)ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ ۱۲۰۰ – ٤۰٫۰‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪1.6x‬‬
‫‪ ۱٥۰۰ – ٥۰٫۰‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪2.0x‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ ] [ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪] :‬‬‫[‬
‫ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ ] [ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬‫ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪] :‬‬‫[‬
‫ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪۲۹:٥۹‬‬‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪Camera & Imaging‬‬
‫‪.(CIPA) Products Association‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪/‬ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ )= ‪ ٤:۳ (٤۸‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪20M/5184x3888‬‬
‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪(۱‬‬
‫‪10M/3648x2736‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ ‪(۲‬‬
‫‪3M/2048x1536‬‬
‫)ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪0.3M/640x480‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫‪ ۱٦‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‬
‫‪ ٥۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ۲٦‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ۰٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ*‬
‫‪1680‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ۰٥‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۱٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪2729‬‬
‫‪ ۱۰‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ۲۲‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۳٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪3217‬‬
‫‪5061‬‬
‫‪9344‬‬
‫‪16755‬‬
‫‪53992‬‬
‫‪80988‬‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫* ‪ ٥۲‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۱۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪.(٦٦ =) iFrame‬‬
‫● ﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻭﺿﻌﺗﻬﺎ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲۹‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥۹‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD Speed Class 10‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‬
‫(‬
‫(‬
‫‪ ٥۰‬ﺳﻡ – ‪ ۳٫٥‬ﻡ‬
‫‪ ۲٫۰ – ۱٫٤‬ﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ۱٫٤‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫–‬
‫‪ ۱٫۰‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ۸٫۰‬ﻡ – ﻻﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫‪ ۱٫٤‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻻﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ )‬
‫*‬
‫*‬
‫‪ ٥۰ – ۱‬ﺳﻡ‬
‫‪ ۱‬ﺳﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫[ )ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ(‬
‫]‬
‫‪ ۱٫٤‬ﻡ – ﻻ ﻣﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫* ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪,0.8 ,1 ,1.3 ,1.6 ,2 ,2.5 ,3.2 ,4 ,5 ,6 ,8 ,10 ,13 ,15‬‬
‫‪,1/13 ,1/10 ,1/8 ,1/6 ,1/5 ,1/4 ,0.3 ,0.4 ,0.5 ,0.6‬‬
‫‪,1/80 ,1/60 ,1/50 ,1/40 ,1/30 ,1/25 ,1/20 ,1/15‬‬
‫‪,1/400 ,1/320 ,1/250 ,1/200 ,1/160 ,1/125 ,1/100‬‬
‫‪,1/1600 ,1/1250 ,1/1000 ,1/800 ,1/640 ,1/500‬‬
‫‪1/3200 ,1/2500 ,1/2000‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫(‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ )‬
‫(‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫‪ 1/3200 – 1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ٦٫۰‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤٫٥‬ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ UHS-I‬ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۸‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ .Canon‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻋﻭﺍﻣﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[*‬
‫‪) f/8.0 – f/3.2‬ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‪) f/8.0 – f/6.9 ،‬ﻣﻘﺭﱠ ﺏ(‬
‫‪,F6.9 ,F6.3 ,F5.6 ,F5.0 ,F4.5 ,F4.0 ,F3.5 ,F3.2‬‬
‫‪F8.0 ,F7.1‬‬
‫* ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﺎﺡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻗﻳﻡ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﻣﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪CB-2LY/CB-2LYE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۳‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۳٫۷‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱۰٦۰‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ۳۰۰‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ٤۰ – ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۰٫۰۸٥‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ( ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۰٫۰٥‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ )‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ(‬
‫‪ ٤٫۲‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ۰٫۷ ،‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪(NB-6LH‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ :‬ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ :‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫)ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺅﺷﺭﻳﻥ(‬
‫‪ ٤۰ – ۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ AiAF‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪۷٤ (AF‬‬
‫‪) Av‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪۱۰۷ Camera Connect‬‬
‫‪۱٤٥ CameraWindow‬‬
‫‪۱۱۸ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫‪۱٥۰ DPOF‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪) M‬ﺗﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۱‬‬
‫‪) Macro‬ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ( ‪۷۲‬‬
‫‪P‬‬
‫‪) P‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۷‬‬
‫‪۱٤٦ ,۱٤۲ PictBridge‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫‪۱۰۳ Story Highlights‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫‪) Tv‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۸۰‬‬
‫ﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪) iFrame‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪٦٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫‪۱۷٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۷۳ AF‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺫﻛﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ‪٤۹ ,٤۸‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪۹۹ ,۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ← ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪۱٤٥ ,۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ← ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۹۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۷۳ AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪۷۳ MF‬‬
‫ﺯﻭﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪٥۰ AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷٦ AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ )ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ( ‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ← ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ‪۳۷ ,۳۲ ,۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ‪۱٤۸ ,۹۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ‪۱٦ ,۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ‪۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ‪۱٦۰ ,۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ← ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،FUNC.‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪۹۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪٥۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫← ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫← ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫← ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ‪۲۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۰‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪۸۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﻲء ‪۷۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﻝ ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ )ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ( ‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪٥۳ ,٥۲ ,۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ‪۹۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ( ‪٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ‪٤۲‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪) Auto‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۳۱ ,۲۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ‪۱٤٦ ,۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪۷٤ (AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ‪۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ‪۸۷‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٦۷ AE‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪۱۷۱‬‬
‫ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺕ‬
‫ﺥ‬
‫ﻕ‬
‫ﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۹۹ ,٦۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺳﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪۷٤ AF‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﺷﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺯﺋﺑﻕ ‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪٤۲ ,۳٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪۳۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺟﻐﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ( ‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪۷۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ‪٤۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲٥‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪FUNC.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ‪۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ‪۲۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۱۰ Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦۸ AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷٦ AF‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷۹ FE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ( ‪٦٤‬‬
‫ﻫﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﺙ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻻﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ‪٦۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦۸ AE‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷۹ FE‬‬
‫ﺭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺻﻡ ← ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﺯ‬
‫ﺯﺍﻫﻲ ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۹‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻝ ‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺱ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪٦۹ ISO‬‬
‫ﺵ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱٤۱ ,۲‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺹ‬
‫ﺛﻠﺞ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﻭﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻲ ‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺝ‬
‫ﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ← ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺡ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ‪۱۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪۲٥‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫‪۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪۱٤٤ ,۱٤۱ AC‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪٦۸‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﻟﻲ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۷‬‬
‫ﻉ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۹۰‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۸٥ GPS‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ‪۸۹‬‬
‫ﻙ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪۱٤۲ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪۱٤۳ (AV‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ ‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫ﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲۰‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ ‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺅﻗﺕ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻲ ‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫‪۷۲ Macro‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪۷۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء ‪۳٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪۳۸‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ )ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪۷۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻠﻐﻣﺯ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ( ‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۱۰٦ Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪WLAN‬‬
‫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻘﺎﺏ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎﻙ ﻟﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪،WLAN‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ WLAN‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﺭﺿﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﻘﻭﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻪ‬‫ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻗﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻼﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻛﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺭﺍﺗﻳﺟﻳﺔ )ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻳﺎﺑﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻼً ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﺑﺙ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻻﺣﺗﻭﺍء ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺃﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺧﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺩﻳﺭﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻠﺩ ﻣﻔﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ‪ -‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻁﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻛﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺭﺟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﻔﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺗﺧﺎﺫ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺻﺎﺭﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺫﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.LAN‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﻟﻺﺻﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ )ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺄﻱ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻗﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺳﺭﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ(‪ .‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻳُﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﺻﻭﻻً ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺍﻗﺏ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﺻﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻠﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺿﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺗﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻧﺗﺣﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﺃﻭ ﻫﺟﻭﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﻁﻼﻕ )ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺣﺻﻝ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺗﻙ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﻟﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻬﻡ ﺟﻳﺩ ﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺎﻁﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﺗﺿﻔﻲ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ‪ -‬ﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ‪ - DPS over IP‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‬
‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ‪ Windows‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ‪ App Store‬ﻭ‪ iPhone‬ﻭ‪ iPad‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺩ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬
‫● ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ iFrame‬ﻭﺭﻣﺯ ‪ iFrame‬ﻫﻣﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪Apple Inc.‬‬
‫● ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭ ‪ Wi-Fi Alliance‬ﻭ™‪ WPA‬ﻭ™‪ WPA2‬ﻭ™‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺻﺎﻟﺢ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬
‫®‬
‫®‬
‫● ﺇﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ NFC Forum, Inc.‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻟﻛﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ exFAT‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺧﺻﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft‬ﻣﺩﻣﺟﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪● This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video‬‬
‫‪and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only‬‬
‫‪(1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a video‬‬
‫‪provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4‬‬
‫‪compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use‬‬
‫‪for MPEG-4 standard.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺋﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺗﺳﺗﻧﺩ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺫﻛﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺧﺳﺎﺋﺭ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۷‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising